This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op-tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual: Rollover Warning Label.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are ... The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all...
2015
OWNER'S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner's Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road or working the vehicle, don't overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to "On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate 1
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also is stamped into the right front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16 Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .23
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Power Liftgate -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .50 Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .67 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM feature, (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch 2
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Key Fob
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
Emergency Key Removal
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro- 2
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
· Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection.
· The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
CAUTION!
· Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has by the party responsible for compliance could void the
never been programmed.
user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED
2
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
Customer Key Programming
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be locks, and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Secu-
performed at an authorized dealer.
rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the
General Information
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min-
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver's door,
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
to the following conditions:
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
for an additional 15 minutes.
· This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the "OFF" position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information).
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
· For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: · Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
· Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
· Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:
· Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
· Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
· Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
NOTE:
· The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
· The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound.
· When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior 2
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
NOTE:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
· The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the "Dome ON" position (extreme top position).
· The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the power liftgate, remote start your vehicle (if equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The 2
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Fob
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lamps With Lock
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
This feature allows the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Headlight Illumination On Approach
NOTE:
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless 2
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
· The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
· You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
· Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please dispose of them according to respect for environment and local laws.
· Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
· Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You can dispose of them either in the correct containers as specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership, which will deal with their disposal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 2
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
· The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
· Shift lever in PARK · Doors closed · Hood closed · HAZARD switch off · BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
· Battery at an acceptable charge level
· RKE PANIC button not pressed
· Fuel meets minimum requirement
· System not disabled from previous remote start event
· Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
· Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
· Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Abort Message On Driver Information Display (DID) -- If Equipped
The following messages will display in the DID if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- 2
turely: · Remote Start Cancelled -- Door Ajar · Remote Start Cancelled -- Hood Ajar · Remote Start Cancelled -- Fuel Low · Remote Start Cancelled -- System Fault · Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle to Reset
The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
· For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
· The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
NOTE:
· If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.
· If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
· The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: "Remote Start Active -- Push Start Button" will display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until you press the start button. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
When remote start is activated, Auto-Comfort will work anytime the temperature conditions are correct when the feature is enabled regardless of remote start or regular keyless go start. and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Comfort System can be activated and deactivated 2
through the Uconnect® system. For more information on Comfort System operation refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
· For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
2
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the door lock switch is pressed down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
If the door lock switch is pressed while the ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in your radio.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature -- If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-GoTM. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
· Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
· If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the driver's front door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 2
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver's front door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press", refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE Transmitter is required.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location 1 -- Electronic Liftgate Release 2 -- Lock Button Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle being used to lock the vehicle.
2
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release. If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when you press the electronic liftgate release. For further information, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".
To Lock The Vehicle's Doors
With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
· After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
· The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
· Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the passive entry system.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
down automatically. To cancel the "Auto-Down" movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an "Auto-Down" feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go
Auto Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection -- Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Auto Up Window Switches
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Window Lockout Button
Wind Buffeting
The Window Lockout button on the driver's door allows Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 2
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls, windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
push the Window Lockout button again.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Window Lockout Button
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release. If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release. For further information, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location 1 -- Electronic Liftgate Release 2 -- Lock Button Location
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate -- If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic liftgate release (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" located in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle") or by pushing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console, or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate 2
opening. Pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings) and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to Uconnect® Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
· In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.
· If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
· The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
· The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -22°F (-30°C) or temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate switches.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.
· If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
· There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
· The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the liftgate opening, to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob twice to fully open the liftgate, and then push it twice to close.
· If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
· If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
· If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
· If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
2
WARNING!
· Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
· If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: · Seat Belt Systems · Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags · Supplemental Active Head Restraints · Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Consumer Assistance.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front 2
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. · Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or outboard front passenger's (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work 2
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. · In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. · It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. · Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. · Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. · A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. · A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. · A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
· A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
2
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together. · A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Anchorage
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
2
WARNING!
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
· ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
· Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) -- If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child Restraints" section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor · Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's midsection. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
· The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
· Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
2
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 -- Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim) 2 -- Seatback
3 -- Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 4 -- Head Restraint Guide Tubes
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to "Adjusting Active Head Restraints" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, you must reset the head restraint on the driver's and front passenger's seat before driving. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure).
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Review Table Below A -- Downward Movement B -- Rearward Movement C -- Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag 2
system components:
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
· Air Bag Warning Light
· Steering Wheel and Column
· Instrument Panel
NOTE:
AHR In Reset Position
· Knee Impact Bolsters · Advanced Front Air Bags
· If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
· For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
· Supplemental Side Air Bags · Supplemental Knee Air Bags · Front and Side Impact Sensors
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· Seat Belt Pretenioners
· Seat Belt Buckle Switch
· Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 -- Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 -- Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 -- Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as 2
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
· No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.
· Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
· Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
· Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
· Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
· Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, 2
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
· Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
· Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags 2
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
· As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
· Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
· After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
· Cut off fuel to the engine.
· Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
· Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
· Unlock the doors automatically.
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag 2
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
· The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.
· The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
· The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made.
2
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
2
should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK (7328243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information:
· www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
2
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
· When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Combined Weight of the Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an "X" Below
LATCH
Seat Belt Only
LATCH
Seat Belt + Top 2
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
· Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
· Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
No
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
No
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
No
Never "share" a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in- 2
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner's manual for more
information.
Yes
The head restraints may be removed in the
center seating position only.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Tether Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
2
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
WARNING!
· Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
· Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to "Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System" for typical installation instructions.
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child 2
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description under "Occupant Restraints."
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor · Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
No
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
The head restraints may be removed in the center seating position only.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
2
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING! (Continued)
approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section "Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System" for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
· The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible 2
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
· An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
· If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child opening between the seatbacks as you remove
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
slack in the strap.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle."
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
· Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon 2
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: · Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. · If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Air Bag Warning Light
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
The light should come on and remain on for four vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they 2
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
not lit during starting, see your authorized or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. · Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners. · Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. · Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. · Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. · If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped . . . .123 Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped . . .124 Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130 Power Folding Outside Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132 3
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . .133
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
Power Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .162
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment -- Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . .152 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .165 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . .168 Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .168 Automatic High Beam -- If Equipped . . . . . .169 Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped . . . . .169
Automatic Headlight Leveling -- HID Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .171 Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped . . .174 Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Ambient Light -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .177 Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped . . . . . . . .181
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .183 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .194 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .194
To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .201 Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .206 Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .207 Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .210 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .221
FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .228 Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .229 3
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .229 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .237 Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .238 Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .239
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .239
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped . . .244 Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .246 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .247 Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .250 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .251 Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 POWER SUNROOF -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .255 Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .257 Closing Sunroof -- Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .257 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .261
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .263 POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .268
3
Closing Sunroof -- Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .261 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Opening Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . .261 Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . .261 Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Closing Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . . .262 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . . .262 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . .282
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
· Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On or Off through the touchscreen.
· Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature On.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button.
NOTE: The ASSIST and 911 features operate through the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is active. Refer to your "Uconnect® System supplement manual" for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
· Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just press the Assist button and you'll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
· Uconnect® Access Customer Care In-vehicle support for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
· Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, 3
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator: · Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
· The vehicle brand.
· The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
· If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
· The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. · Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. 3
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
· The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
· The Phone Screen will display the following message "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
· An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
· The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond Chrysler Group LLC's control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
· The ignition key has been removed from the ignition and the delayed accessories mode is active.
· The ignition key is in OFF position.
· The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
· The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash.
· The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
· Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
· Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
· Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
General Information
· Wireless network congestion.
· Weather.
· Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle's wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. 3
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
three detent positions:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
· Full forward position
· Full rearward position
· Normal position
Power Folding Outside Mirrors -- If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a 3
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirror Switch 1 -- Mirror Direction Control 2 -- Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
The Drivers side mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) -- If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory seat setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
3
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature -- If Equipped
The sun visor "Slide-On-Rod" feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
· The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the 3
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
NOTE:
· The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to "Modes Of Operation" for further information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Blind Spot Alert Off
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your 3
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats -- If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight-way power driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches 1 -- Seatback Switch 2 -- Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
the switch when the desired position is reached.
3
WARNING!
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in seat belt.
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
(Continued)
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
3
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment -- Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature -- If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into place.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care 3
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
· Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause
Heated Seats -- If Equipped
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
On some models, the front and rear seats may be ture of the seat.
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
· Press the heated seat button HIGH setting ON.
once to turn the
· Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LOW setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Rear Heated Seats -- If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
3
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
Rear Heated Seat Switches
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
· Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the ventilated seat button HIGH.
once to choose
· Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LOW.
· Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a 3
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints -- Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
· In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to "Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
WARNING!
· Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints -- Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-
straints are in their upright positions when the seat is 3
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Rear Head Restraint
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
NOTE:
Rear Seat Release
· Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
· Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward. Rear Seat Folded
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
3
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
· The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function.
· The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Memory Seat Switch
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
· Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
· To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer to "Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory" in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information Display (DID) will display which memory position has been set.
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the "Memory To FOB" feature through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings " in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following: 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position. 2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
3
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
Information Display (DID).
4. Within five seconds, press and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
· To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch.
· To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
· To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch.
· To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, steering column (if equipped) and pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
· When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
· The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver's door.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE:
· Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
3
· To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a "Rain Sensitive Wiper System" and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute, and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop. Refer to "Windshield Wipers And Washers" in this section for further information.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable feature. When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
Automatic High Beam -- If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
· The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
· To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
3
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.
Automatic Headlight Leveling -- HID Headlights Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights -- If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
· Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations.
· The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Fog Lights -- If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control.
3
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the "Party" mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the "Parade" mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle's battery, load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up 3
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON.
Dimmer Control Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Ambient Light -- If Equipped
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
second time.
ity of the floor and center console area.
3
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
3
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
Multifunction Lever
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the "park" position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the "park" position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the 3
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings 3
to activate this feature.
Mist Control
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
· The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
· Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
· The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:
· Low Ambient Temperature -- When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
· Transmission In NEUTRAL Position -- When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit -- On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The 3
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element ON.
once to
· Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
(Continued)
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 -- ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME
4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired 3
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will 3
continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under-
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen To Accelerate For Passing
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
U.S. Speed (mph)
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Electronic Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
3
· If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
· If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
· Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
· Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
· The ACC system: · Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. · Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. · Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
· When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones). · When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
3
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
· When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
· When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Driver Information Display (DID) displays "ACC Ready."
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
When the system is OFF, the DID displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
1 -- NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME 4 -- SET-/DECEL
5 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- INCREASE 6 -- ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF 7 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- DECREASE 8 -- CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following To Activate/Deactivate
conditions:
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
· When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
· When you apply the brakes.
"ACC Ready."
· When the parking brake is set.
3
· When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
· When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
· When the brakes are overheated.
· When the driver door is open.
· When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the DID will display "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle To Cancel
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
The following conditions cancel the system:
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
· The brake pedal is applied.
speed. If this occurs:
· The CANCEL button is pressed.
· The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in · An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
3
the DID.
· The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
· The system will not be controlling the distance be- Drive position.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
· Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
· Driver door is opened at low speeds.
· A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
· The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off
NOTE:
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button is pressed.
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pressed.
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
· ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
· The ignition is turned OFF.
WARNING!
· You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET + button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the · If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will 3
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to " Under- continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information. button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen in the DID.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to " Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
NOTE:
· When you override and push the SET + button or SET buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
· When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
· The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
· The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the "Sensed Vehicle Indica-
tor" icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-
cally to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
3
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting -- Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting -- Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
· The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
· The distance setting is changed.
· The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE" will flash in the DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The "Brake!" Screen in the DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
ACC Operation At Stop
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera- while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic, need for any driver action.
3
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
hand side of the Target vehicles.
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC message will display on the DID and produce a warning
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: · System Cancel · Driver Override · System Off · ACC Proximity Warning
· ACC Unavailable Warning
· The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display "ACC/ FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" and the system will deactivate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path 3
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
· If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
· Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
· If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
· Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will display "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded performance.
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
3
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
Turn Or Bend Example
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
Narrow Vehicle Example
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since 3
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
To Decrease Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will 3
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory:
· The brake pedal is applied.
· The CANCEL button is pressed.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
· You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
· The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- · The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
heated).
pressed.
· The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
Drive position.
MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pressed.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
· The ignition is turned off.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3
FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph (8 km/h).
· The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
· It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
· The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is "On", this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off).
Changing the FCW status to "Off" prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to "Off" prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3
The default status of FCW is the "Far" setting and the Active Braking is the "On" setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the FCW status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
· The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
· FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
· FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the DID displays "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality" or "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
· ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
· Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within
the Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the ve-
hicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again
if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
3
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the DID will display the park assist ready system status.
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Rear Distance (in/cm)
Audible Alert Chime Arc
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater than 79 in (200 cm)
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in (200-100 cm)
39-25 in (100-65 cm)
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow
4th Solid
3rd Solid
Yes
Yes
25-12 in (65-30 cm)
Fast
2nd Flashing
Yes
Less than 12 in (30 cm) Continuous
3
1st Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and the system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the DID will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
SORS" appears in the Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
NOTE:
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt · Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
ating properly.
3
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" · Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
· When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
· When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the DID will display "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper.
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the DID.
· ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
· Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
3
ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
(Continued)
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense® operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/ bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
ParkSense® Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the object's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the 3
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist Ready
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
3
Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the DID display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance (in/cm)
Front Distance (in/cm)
Audible Alert (Chime)
Arcs Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than 79 in (200 cm) Greater than 47 in (120 cm)
None
None No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in (200-100 cm)
39-25 in (100-65 cm)
47-39 in (120-100 cm)
39-25 in (100-65 cm)
Single 1/2 Second Tone (for rear only)
Slow (for rear only)
4th Solid
3rd Solid
Yes
Yes
25-12 in (65-30 cm)
25-12 in (65-30 cm)
Fast
2nd Flashing Yes
Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
1st Flashing Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
approximately five seconds. Refer to "Driver Information
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument
from the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Set- Panel" for further information. When the shift lever/gear
tings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is dis-
further information.
abled, the DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF"
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
3
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense®
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
through ignition cycles.
switch is pressed, and the system requires service, the
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS appears in the Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
· Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
· Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
· When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
· When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
3
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
· ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
· Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF
3
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
(Continued)
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Red Yellow Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
3
· To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included, if equipped.
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
3
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a "push/push" design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the overhead console, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN 3
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
· Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
· If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener 1 -- Door Opener 2 -- Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 3
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Program- 3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
ming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining program while you push and hold the hand-held
steps.
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 3
that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, while you push and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. · To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Using HomeLink®
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink®
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
follow these steps:
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any 3
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until time.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn 3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Canadian/ in your vehicle.
Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: · Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
· Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
· Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
POWER SUNROOF -- IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console. two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
· The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
· In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof -- Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
held rearward again.
forward again.
3
Closing Sunroof -- Express
Pinch Protect Feature
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof -- Express
Wind Buffeting
Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent" and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
· The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is cycled to the Off position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
· This feature is programmable using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
3
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
· In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof -- Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Opening Power Shade -- Express
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. one-half second and the shade will open automatically
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened from any position. The shade will open and stop automati-
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward cally at the half-open position. Press the shade switch
again.
rearward again and release it within one-half second and 3
Closing Sunroof -- Express
the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any shade.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close opera-
Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. The
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch rearward again
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again. until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Power Shade -- Express
Venting Sunroof -- Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.
Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.
Press and release the Vent button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
· The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
cycled to the Off position. Opening either front door 3
will cancel this feature.
· This feature is programmable using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
· All accessories connected to the "battery" powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
· To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR® knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
3
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Outlet
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area.
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched from switched "ignition" only to constant "battery" powered all the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
· Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
· Do not touch with wet hands.
3
· Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 -- F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 2 -- F90F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 3 -- F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
· After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit, as will most new computers and power tools.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
3
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
To avoid serious injury or death: · Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. · Do not touch with wet hands. · Close the lid when not in use. · If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console.
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers located in the fold-down center armrest.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
STORAGE Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the latch and lower the glove compartment door.
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel.
3
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Console Features
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy The center console contains both an upper and a lower
access.
storage area.
Door Panel Storage
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
the small latch located on the lid.
lower storage compartment.
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Lower Storage Compartment
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player located in the center console.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player -- If Equipped
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it. Press And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
3
Three-Press Switch
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area.
Two additional storage bins are located under the load floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the liftgate opening.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will not be available.
Rear Storage Bin
Tether Strap
Lower Storage Bins
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Retractable Cargo Area Cover -- If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
3
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover.
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Cover
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
WARNING!
· To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and 3
use seat belts. · Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers. The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar.
· Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
· Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
· Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned the first detent for intermittent operation and to OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the "park" the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. position.
Rotating the center portion upward once more Rear Window Defroster
will activate the washer pump which will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position.
The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
3
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the MOPAR® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
· To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
· If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
CAUTION!
· To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the 3
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface. · To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. · Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued) · Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .288 DID Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .290
DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 4
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .315
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID). . . . . .299 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
DID Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 DID White Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 DID Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect® 5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . .319
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect® 8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . .336
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .357
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .368
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Blu-rayTM Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .371
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Play A DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Blu-rayTM Disc Player Remote Control -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 CD/DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .380 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .380
Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .381 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .390 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .406 Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 4
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .411 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 -- Air Outlet 2 -- Instrument Cluster 3 -- Radio 4 -- Glove Compartment 5 -- Climate Controls
6 -- Lower Switch Bank 7 -- Hazard Switch 8 -- Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub) 9 -- ESC Button 10 -- Ignition Switch
11 -- Hood Release 12 -- Fuel Door Release 13 -- Headlight Switch 14 -- Dimmer Control
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
5. Front Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
8. Speedometer
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
6. Upper Left Selectable DID
This area of the cluster will display selectable information such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in this section.
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will chime, and a DID message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
Indicates vehicle speed.
9. Upper Right Selectable DID
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
further information, refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in this section.
4
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
WARNING! (Continued)
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
13. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
14. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- 4
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
15. Driver Information Display (DID)
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If she/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
When the appropriate conditions exist, this Driver Information Display (DID) messages. Refer to "Driver Information Display" of your owners manual for more information.
16. Selectable DID Menu
This area of the cluster will display the DID selectable
menu. For further information, refer to "Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID)" in this section.
4
17. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" of your owners manual for further information.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
· Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driverinteractive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
4
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator -- If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Driver Information Display (DID) Location
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The DID Menu items consists of the following: · Digital Speedometer · Vehicle Info · Terrain -- If Equipped · Driver Assist -- If Equipped · Fuel Economy · Trip · Audio · Stored Messages · Screen Setup · Speed Warning -- If Equipped · Diagnostics -- If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
DID Buttons
· UP Arrow Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
· OK Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and submenus.
· DOWN Arrow Button
The OK button may be used for the following: Selection Reset (hold) Clearing (hold)
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and
DID Displays The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
4
submenus.
cluster and consist of multiple sections:
· RIGHT Arrow Button
1. Main Screen -- The inner ring of the display will
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
access the information screens or submenu non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
screens of a main menu item.
white for on demand information.
· BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
2. Audio Information and Sub-menu Information -- Whenever there are submenus available, the position within the submenus is shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel Economy)
7. Air Suspension Status -- If Equipped
8. 4WD Status -- Status
9. Selectable Gauge 1 The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays "pop up" messages
that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:
· Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure".
· Unstored Messages
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Engine Oil Life Reset
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the Oil Change Required
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the vehicle). will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
· Unstored Messages Until RUN
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
4
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are driving style.
"Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start."
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
· Five Second Unstored Messages
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
message takes control of the main display area for five performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An following procedure.
example of this message type is "Automatic High Beams
On."
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Reset Procedure
· Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
· Service Airbag System · Traction Control Off · Washer Fluid Low · Oil Pressure Low
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DID Messages
· Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
· Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
· Oil Change Due · Fuel Low · Service Antilock Brake System · Service Electronic Throttle Control · Service Power Steering · Cruise Off · Cruise Ready · ACC Override
· Cruise Set To XXX MPH
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
· Right Turn Signal Light Out
· Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) "Inflate Tire to · Left Turn Signal Light Out
XX"
· IGN OR ACC
· Service Tire Pressure System
· Vehicle Not in Park
· Speed Warning Set
· IGN OR ACC KEYLESS GO
· Speed Warning Exceeded
· Key in Ignition Lights On
4
· Parking Brake Engaged
· Remote Start Active Key to Run
· Brake Fluid Low
· Remote Start Active Push Start Button
· Service Electronic Braking System
· Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
· Engine Temperature Hot
· Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
· Battery Voltage Low
· Remote Start Aborted Door Open
· Service Electronic Throttle Control
· Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
· Lights On
· Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Remote Start Aborted Time Expired · Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset · Service Airbag System · Service Airbag Warning Light · Door Open · Doors Open · Liftgate Open · Gear Not Available · Shift Not Allowed · Vehicle Speed To High To Shift · Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse · Autostick Unavailable Service Required · Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
· Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake · Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool · Transmission Cool Ready to Drive · Service Transmission · Service Shifter · Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling · Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On · Washer Fluid Low · Service Air Suspension System · Normal Ride Height Achieved · Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved · Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved · Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
· Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
DID White Telltales
· Selected Ride Height Not Permitted · Service Air Suspension System Immediately · Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height · Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait · Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
· Cruise Ready
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Adaptive Cruise Control system is ready to be
activated.
4
· Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
· Hill Descent
· Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance · Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Hill Descent system is activated.
Tire Change · Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
· Selec -- Speed
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Selec-Speed is activated.
middle, and red telltales on the left.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Adaptive Cruise Control Ready and Adaptive Cruise Control Set
· This telltale will turn on to indicate that the ACC is ready and has been set to the desired speed.
DID Amber Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include: · Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L), this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added. · Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
· Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
· Service Forward Collision Warming -- If Equipped
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
· Service Adaptive Cruise Control -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
· Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include: · Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. 4
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
· Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies."
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
· Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information. · Electric Power Steering Malfunction If Equipped
This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service.
· Liftgate Ajar
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
DID Green Telltales · Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to "Electronic Speed Con-
trol" in "Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle."
4
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID.
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speedometer
MPH To km/h
Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to toggle between the Speedometer display type (Analog or Digital).
Analog Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the MPH to km/h icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the OK button to change the display between MPH or km/h.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Digital Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and push and release the OK button to select or reset the following resettable submenus: Tire Pressure Transmission Temperature Oil Temperature Oil Pressure Oil Life Battery Voltage
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Terrain -- If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN
arrow button until the Terrain display
icon/title is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT or LEFT
arrow button to display the SelecTerrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain,
4
and Wheel Articulation.
Driver Assist -- If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Driver Assist display icon/title is highlighted in the DID. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push and hold the OK button to reset feature.
· Distance mi · Average Fuel Economy · Elapsed Time
· Range
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
· Current MPG or L/100 km
Audio
· Average MPG or L/100 km Trip
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the DID, then toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Stored Messages
Speed Warning -- If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages Menu icon/title is
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or DOWN
stored messages are. Screen Setup
arrow to select a desired speed, then push and release OK to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed
4
Warning telltale will display in the DID, and a chime will
sound with a pop up warning message when the set
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow speed is exceeded.
button until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
OK button to enter the submenus and follow Current Gear
the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is dis-
· On
played in the instrument cluster as well as the location · Off
that information is displayed.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Left · None · Compass · Outside Temp (default setting) · Time · Range To Empty (RTE) · Fuel Economy Average · Fuel Economy Current · Trip A · Trip B
Upper Right · None · Compass (default setting) · Outside Temp · Time · Range To Empty (RTE) · Fuel Economy Average · Fuel Economy Current · Trip A · Trip B
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
· Cancel
· Okay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
4
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen
1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have Screen Off and Back buttons located below the Uconnect® system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect® touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect® 5.0 Personal Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Suspension, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down 4
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the "Run" position.
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Display Mode
When in this display you may select the "Auto" or "Manual" display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the "Auto" or "Manual" button on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Set Language
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
· Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select one of multiple When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no- sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga- pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the
tion system (if equipped). Press the "Set Language" touchscreen then select from "on" or "off." Press the back
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan- arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
guage button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow menu.
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Voice
4
· Units
After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may select to have the DID, · Voice Response Length odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
"Metric" to make your selection. Press the back arrow sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Length, press the "Voice Response Length" button on the
menu.
touchscreen and select from "Brief" or "Detailed." Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Show Command List
· Set Date
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the "Show Command List" button on the touchscreen and select from "Always," "With Help" or "Never." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock & Date
After pressing the "Clock & Date" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format manually. Press the "Set Time" button then choose from a "12 hour" or "24 hour format." Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select "AM" or "PM." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may set the date manually. Press the "Set Date" button then press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the "Safety/Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and release the "Sound Only" or "Sounds and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense®" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
· Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After
4
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, press the "ParkView® Backup Camera Active
Guidelines" button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button on the faceplate, the "settings" button on the touchscreen, then the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the "Parkview Backup camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
· Hill Start Assist -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlights Off Delay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
setting, press the "Headlight Off Delay" button on the headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
selection, press the "Lights w/Wipers" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button
4
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of · Auto High Beams -- If Equipped
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, ditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High
press the "Illuminated Approach" button and choose Beams" button on the touchscreen and make your selec-
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back tion. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous return to the previous menu. Refer to "Lights/Auto High
menu.
Beams -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
· Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights w/Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door Locks" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock On Exit" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Flash Lights w/Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
· Horn w/Remote Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry "Horn w/Remote Start" button on the touchscreen and
Feature. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on
w/Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen · Remote Door Unlock to return to the previous menu.
4
· Horn w/Lock
When "Remote Door Unlock" is selected, you may choose from "Driver" or "All." Select "All" to have all
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your "Driver" to have the only the driver door open with the
selection, press the "Sound Horn With Lock" button on first push of the key fob.
the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: Passive Entry -- If Equipped. If "All" is selected, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door handle is grasped. If "Driver" is selected, only the
driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is
grasped.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Memory Linked to Fob -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Memory Linked to Fob" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location if "Memory Linked to Fob" is set to (ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Power Lift Gate Alert -- If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the "Power Lift Gate Alert" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Auto Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
Engine Off Options
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start" After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be touchscreen the following settings will be available.
available:
· Easy Exit Seats -- If Equipped
· Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seats" button on the 4
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto Heated Seats" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. Press the "Headlight Off Delay" button on the touchscreen and choose from "0," "30," "60," or "90" seconds to select your desired time interval.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Engine Off Power Delay
Suspension -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Press the "Engine Off Power Delay" button on the touchscreen and choose from "0 sec," "45 sec," "5 min" or "10 min" to select your desired time interval. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
· Auto Entry/Exit -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Suspension" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit. To make your selection, press the "Auto Entry/Exit" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
· Display Suspension Messages
When this feature is selected, it automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into park. Press the "Auto Entry/Exit" button on the touchscreen and choose from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When "All" is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed. When "Warning Only" is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
· Tire Jack Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
· Wheel Alignment Mode
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension
disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while while performing a wheel alignment service. Before per-
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. To make your forming a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled.
selection, press the "Tire Jack Mode" button on the Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.
touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
· Transport Mode
Compass Settings -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Compass Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
4
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is · Variance disabled to assist with flat bed towing. To make your
selection, press the "Transport Mode" button on the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
· Perform Compass Calibration
Press the "Calibration" button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the "ON" button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Equalizer
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the "C" icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Speed Adjusted Volume" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1," "2" or "3" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
4
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the "AUX Volume Offset" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Loudness -- If Equipped
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
· Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
· Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "Yes" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings reset to default. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
4
· Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select "Yes" to Clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared". Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect® 8.4 Personal Settings
Press the "Apps" or the "Controls" button on the touchscreen, then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Suspension, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option, press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status, select from "Day," "Night" or "Auto" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and
""setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
4
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
· Set Theme
This feature will allow you to choose a background theme for the display screen. The theme will change the background color, highlight color, and button color of the display screen.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Set Language
· Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the "Set Language" button on the touchscreen, then select the desired language button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Units
When in this display, you may select to have the DID, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or "Metric" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Controls Screen Time-Out
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the "Controls Screen Time-Out" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Voice
After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Brief" or "Detailed" button on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible 4
options while in a voice session. To change the Show Command List settings, press the "Always," "With Help," or "Never" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock
· Set Time Minutes
After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the "Time Format" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the "12hrs" or "24hrs" setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Time In Status Bar -- If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Status setting press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the "Near" or "Far" 4
button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Forward Collision Warning -- If Equipped
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking -- If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
· ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and release the "Sound" or "Sound and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense®" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
· Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or Uconnect® System -- if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the "ParkSense® Front Chime Volume" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect® System -- if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
To make your selection, press the "ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
4
When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in "Lights" mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When "Lights & Chime" mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When "Off" is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the "Off," "Lights" or "Lights & Chime" button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status, press the "ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into "PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the "Controls" button on the touchscreen, the "settings" button on the touchscreen, then the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the "Parkview Backup camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
"Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
· Hill Start Assist -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. · Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Lights/Automatic High Beam -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote 4
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. · Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door Locks" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.
To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock on Exit" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
· 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection, press either the "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn with Remote Start" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors.
When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
4
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "All Doors," all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver's door opening. If "Driver Door" is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
· Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".
· Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver's seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Power Lift Gate Chime -- If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the "Power Lift Gate Chime" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
Auto-On Comfort -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
press the "Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts" until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
4
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Easy Exit Seat -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seat" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Engine Off Power Delay
· Auto Entry/Exit Suspension -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the "+" or "-" button to choose from "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5 minutes," or "10 minutes." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to automatically lower the vehicle from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to park. To change the mode status press the "Auto Entry/Exit Suspension" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Suspension -- If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
When this feature is selected, the vehicle lowers the suspension for easy entry/exit. Press the "Auto Entry/ Exit Suspension" button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or
the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Suspension Display Messages
When "All" is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed. When "Warnings Only" is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
· Tire Jack Mode
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Press the "Tire Jack Mode" button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
· Transport Mode
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Press the "Trans-
port Mode" button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
· Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Balance/Fade
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the `C' icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Equalizer
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Off," "1," "2" or "3" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from 3 to +3. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Loudness -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
· Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the touchscreen, then choose "Yes" or "No." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
4
menu.
· Channel Skip
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth®" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Subscription Information
Restore Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen and pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "OK" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears stating settings reset to default.
Clear Personal Data
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
the touchscreen the following settings will be available: refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
· Clear Personal Data
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove per- plugged into the USB port. sonal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button
4
and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
clear all personal data?" select "OK" to Clear, or "Cancel" and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
stating Personal data cleared."
visit Apple's website for software updates.
System Information
After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · System Information
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-rayTM Discs, listen to audio over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of standard video games or audio devices. Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar with its features and operation.
Getting Started
· Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen · Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
· Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-rayTM Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-rayTM Disc Player, the icon will be present on the Player.
· Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing the Power button on the remote control.
· When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/BlurayTM Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s) turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters turn ON and playback begins.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
· With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1) on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 (driver's side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger side).
4
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control Channel Selector
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System. · The Remote Control · The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Headphone Channel Selector
· The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the rear seat occupants using the remote control.
Blu-rayTM Disc Player Play A Blu-rayTM Disc The Blu-rayTM Disc player is located in the center console.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
To view a Blu-rayTM insert the disc into the Blu-rayTM Disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after the BlurayTM Disc is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into Blu-rayTM Disc Player follow these steps:
Using The Touchscreen Radio
4
Blu-rayTM Disc Player Location
Rear Media Control Screen
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1; This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is not highlighted select button to access controls for Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2; This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is not highlighted select button to access controls for Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
2. RSE Power Press to turn RSE On/Off.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
3. RSE Mute
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
control screen.
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
· Press the Media button on the touchscreen, then press
the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
· Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
4
playing the Blu-rayTM Disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
· Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger side rear screen), then press the source key and using the up and down arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK button.
· Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu and options.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 player.
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input
2. Right audio in (red)
3. Left audio in (white)
4. Video in (yellow)
Play A DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc with the label facing as indicated on the DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc player. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc on Rear 1 (driver side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc on Rear 2 (passenger side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter.
Using The Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push ENTER/OK.
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect® radio touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media Control screen.
4
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, the select source button on the touchscreen and then the DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To exit press the X at the top right of the screen.
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or Blu-rayTM Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
· The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
· The Blu-rayTM Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and Blu-rayTM Discs.
· Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
· Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
· Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-rayTM Disc Player Remote Control -- If Equipped
Blu-rayTM Player Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Controls And Indicators
1. Power -- Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators -- When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel 4
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE -- Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch -- Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control. When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. -- Push to navigate menus.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. SETUP -- Push to access the screen settings menu. 15. BACK -- Push to exit out of menus or return to
7. -- Push and hold to fast forward through the
source selection screen.
current audio track or video chapter.
16. -- Push to navigate menus.
8. / (Play/Pause) -- Begin/resume or pause disc 17. OK -- Push to select the highlighted option in a
play.
menu.
9. Four Colored Buttons -- Push to access Blu-rayTM Disc features.
10. POPUP/MENU -- Push to bring up repeat and shuffle options, the Blu-rayTM Disc popup menu, the DVD title menu or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD -- Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12. (Stop) -- Stops disc play.
13. -- Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter.
14. -- Mutes headphone audio.
18. -- Push to navigate menus.
19. -- Push to navigate menus.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries: · Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward. · Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown. · Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
4
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 -- Power Button 2 -- Volume Control 3 -- Channel Selection Switch
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch.
NOTE: · When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
· When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
· Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.
· Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.
· Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser (you or your) of this particular Unwired Technology LLC (Unwired) wireless headphone (Product). The warranty is not transferable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from 4
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing the remote control's POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control's naviga-
tion buttons (, ) to select an item, then push the remote control's navigation buttons (, ) to change the
4
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control's ENTER/OK
button.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-rayTM Disc or DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote control's SETUP button activates the
Disc Features control the remote Blu-rayTM Disc player's settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed:
· Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
· Close the video screen.
· To change the current audio mode, push the remote control's SOURCE button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode/Source Select menu.
· When the screen is reopened, the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the remote control's power button to turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-rayTM Disc player is capable of the playing the following types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
· BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
· DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD, DVD-VR
· CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
· DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 6) profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Recorded Discs
The Blu-rayTM Disc player and many DVD discs are The Blu-rayTM Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW
coded by geographic region. These region codes must discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
the DVD disc does not match the region code for the also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
player, the disc will not play.
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re-
corded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
4
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-rayTM Disc be cases where the Blu-rayTM Disc player may not be able
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, compatible format and is playable on other players. To
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
material is automatically mixed down to two channels, lines when recording discs.
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the volume level to account for this change · Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing closed are playable.
the disc or to another mode.
· For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported.
· The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
· Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the Blu-rayTM Disc player, check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-rayTM Disc player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
· The Blu-rayTM Disc player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always end with the extension .mp3 or .MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension .wma or .WMA. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files.
· For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
· Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The Blu-rayTM player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
· Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-rayTM player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
· If you are creating your own files, the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported. For both formats, the recommended sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
· To change the current file, use the remote control's or Blu-rayTM Disc player's button to advance to the next file, or the button to return to the start of the current or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-rayTM Disc player is unable to read the disc, a Disc Error message is displayed on the rear screen and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-rayTM
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-rayTM Disc player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
4
the start of the first track.
The Blu-rayTM Disc player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle's interior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the player will display High Temp and will shut off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-rayTM Disc player.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, MLP Lossless, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Radio Operation
push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ grammed in the radio preset button. CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
4
CD Player
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
control is different depending on which mode you are in. track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
each mode.
after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-rayTM Disc in good condition, take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and 4
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
· This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
· If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
· Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
· Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
General Overview
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® screen.
4
Automatic Climate Controls -- Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to "Automatic Operation" for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the 4
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
· Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
· Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and 4
warmer air from the floor outlets. · Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. · Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Climate Control OFF Button
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
· If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
4
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
NOTE:
· For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
· If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the "AUTO" button on the touchscreen.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the temperature. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
NOTE:
Manual Operation Override
· It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
as possible.
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
· The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
by selecting the Uconnect® customer-programmable allows the front occupants to control the volume of air 4
feature. Refer to the "Uconnect® System Settings" in this circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will selected in Manual operation.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from
each other. If any feature is controlled manually, tempera-
ture control will continue to operate automatically.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
NOTE:
A/C Air Filter
· Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long The climate control system filters outside air containing
periods, as fogging may occur.
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
· Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
totally filtered out. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for filter replacement instruc-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or tions.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Key Features:
Introducing Uconnect®
· 5" touchscreen
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
· Three buttons on either side of the display
4
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4AN
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say
· Cancel to stop a current voice session
· Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
4
· Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 -- Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 -- For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 3 -- Push To End Call
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say
· Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
· Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
· Change source to Bluetooth®
· Change source to iPod®
· Change source to USB
· Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work."
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands
· Call John Smith
· Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
· Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
· Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: "Reply."
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
4
No.
Start without me.
I'll be Late.
Okay. Call me.
Where are you?
Are you there yet?
I will be <number> minutes late.
I'll call you later.
I'm on my way.
I need directions.
Can't talk right
See you in <number> of
minutes.
I'm lost.
now.
Thanks.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
· Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
.
After the beep, say: " Find nearest coffee shop."
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After
4
the beep, say:
· For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: "Enter state."
· For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: "Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Stolen Vehicle Assistance Remote Vehicle Start** Remote Horn and Lights Yelp® Search Voice Texting Roadside Assistance Call Wi-Fi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped. ***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
4
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory-installed Remote Start.)
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to your Mopar® Owner Connect account at moparownerconnect.com.
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
TIP:
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After · Not compatible with iPhone®.
the beep, say the following command: "Send message to John Smith."
· Messages are limited to 140 characters.
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
· The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature.
to process your message.
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
4
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® what you'd like to do. For instance, if you're happy with your message, after the beep, say: "Send."
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message.
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.
1. Press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the "All Apps" button on the touchscreen.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the "Yelp" button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: "YELP
search."
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or business that you'd like Uconnect® to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp®
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel LinkTM is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Show fuel prices
· Show 5 - day weather forecast
· Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
4
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
Mon. Fri., 7:00 am 12:00 am, ET
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 8:00 am 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call.
Uconnect® System Support:
· U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com
· Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .426
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
EightSpeed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .428 5
Extreme Cold Weather
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .438
(Below 20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Precautions -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .424 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/ Precautions -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Quadra-Drive® II System -- If Equipped . . . . .445 SELEC-TERRAINTM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .445 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .447 QUADRA-LIFTTM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .447 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .452 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Quadra-LiftTM -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
When To Use 4WD LOW Range -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .461 Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .471
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .473
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Selec Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped (Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . .486
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .475 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .475 Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .496 5
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .497
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .499
Ready Alert Braking -- If Equipped . . . . . . . .481 TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .504
Rain Brake Support -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . .481 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped (Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . .482
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .507
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Spare Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .517 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .518 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .519 Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Service Tpm System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 3.6L Engine -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 5.7L Engine -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .529 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 5
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit Models) -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .547
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .538
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .557
Recreational Towing Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Recreational Towing Quadra-Trac I® (Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Recreational Towing -- QuadraTrac II® /QuadraDrive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever/transmission gear selector.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
5
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
(Continued)
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. · Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. · Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Key Fob is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a "Vehicle Not In Park" message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN 5
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions -- With Driver's Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
· Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will display "OFF").
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START. To change the ignition positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
· Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
· Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display "ACC"),
· Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will display "ON/RUN"),
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
· Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
· If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
5
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located: · 3.6L Engine -- Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
· 5.7L Engine -- Bundled and fastened to the injector harness.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
WARNING! (Continued) · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or 5
in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. · Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Each time the vehicle is started ECO mode is engaged and an amber light in the center stack of the instrument panel will be illuminated. To disable ECO mode, push the "ECO" switch in the center stack of the instrument panel and the amber light will go out indicating ECO mode is disabled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
5
Fuel Economy Mode Switch When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change the following:
· The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later.
· The torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
· The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
· Vehicles with Quadra-LiftTM air suspension will operate in Aero mode over a broader speed range. Refer to Quadra-LiftTM in Starting and Operating for further information.
· Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation -- Summit Models Only
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation System. This system uses four microphones embedded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise. An onboard frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves through the audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
EightSpeed Automatic Transmission
The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and rearward, always returning to the center position after each gear is selected. The transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the first (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
wheel. Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section for further information.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
5
The transmission shift lever provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT shift positions. Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do not need to push the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering
Shift Lever
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
· Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING! (Continued) · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be 5
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. · Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
· Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
· With brake pedal released, look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
· When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until it stops. When released, the lever will return to the center position.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
DRIVE (D)
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- 5
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Paddle Shift switches (refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-
ing and heat buildup.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S)
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE.
NOTE: When Sport Mode is enabled, vehicles with the Quadra-LiftTM air suspension system will operate in "Aero" Mode. Please refer to Quadra-LiftTM in Starting and Operating for further information.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
1. Stop the vehicle.
recur.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer 5
service is required.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. On Paddle Shift Mode
vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, press and hold Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
5. Restart the engine.
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will operate automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift mode is active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
· The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
· The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
· You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
· If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
· The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
· Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, push and hold the (+) shift paddle until D or S is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
· Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
WARNING!
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
· The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
5
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is personal injury.
enabled, Paddle Shift mode is not active. Pushing the
(+/-) shift paddles in Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control
simply limits the highest allowed gear. Shifts below and
up to that gear will occur automatically.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/ Precautions -- If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I® is a single-speed (HI range only) transfer case, which provides convenient full-time fourwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I® system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended. Refer to "Off-Road Driving Tips" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/ Precautions -- If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case provides three mode positions:
· 4WD HI
· NEUTRAL
· 4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING! (Continued)
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
5
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
(Continued)
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE: Refer to "Selec-Terrain® If Equipped" in "Starting and Operating" for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
4WD LOW
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
WARNING!
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to "Selec-Terrain® If Equipped" for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into "N", and push the "4WD
LOW" button once on the transfer case switch. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a "For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in "N" Press 4 Low" message will flash from the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
Transfer Case Switch
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the 5
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the "4WD LOW" button once on the transfer case switch. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
· If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a "For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N push 4 Low" message will flash from the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the shift.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-LiftTM air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lo-
cated by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blink-
ing (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A "NEUTRAL" message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver
5
Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your
Instrument Panel" for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a "To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual" message will flash from the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
Quadra-Drive® II System -- If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive® II System features two torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the QuadraTrac II® transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels. With a traction difference between left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II® transfer case shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting this system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
SELEC-TERRAINTM -- IF EQUIPPED Description Selec-TerrainTM combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains.
5
Selec-TerrainTM Switch
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-TerrainTM consists of the following positions:
· Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for Snow is NRH.
· Auto Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to NRH.
· Sand Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for Sand is NRH.
· Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to Off Road 1.
· Rock Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-TerrainTM switch is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-TerrainTM system will return to AUTO.
NOTE: Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control. See "Electronic Brake Control System" in this section for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the DID display. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
QUADRA-LIFTTM -- IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-LiftTM air suspension system provides full 5
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-TerrainTM Switch 1 -- Up Button 2 -- Down Button 3 -- Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable) 4 -- Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable) 5 -- Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable) 6 -- Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
· Normal Ride Height (NRH) This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.
· Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1.1 in (28 mm) This is the primary position for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Push the "Up" button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH. Refer to "Off-Road Driving Tips" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
· Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2.2 in (55 mm) This position is intended for offroading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the "Up" button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1. Refer to "Off-Road Driving Tips" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
· Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 in (15 mm) This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph (90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
(40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the shift lever is in the "SPORT" position.
· Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
1.6 in (40 mm) This position lowers the vehicle for
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the "Down" button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is
5
below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin
to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be can-
celled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the "Up" button
once while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/ Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect® TouchScreen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the shift lever is in PARK, the terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer-case is in AUTO" and the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is switched Off and the Door is Open to prevent setting the alarm Off.
The Selec-TerrainTM switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec-TerrainTM switch. The height can be changed from the default Selec-TerrainTM setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons. Refer to "Selec-TerrainTM" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
The system requires that the engine be running for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
The Quadra-LiftTM air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-LiftTM air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect® Access Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your authorized dealer for service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
5
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the DID display. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Operation
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/ disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the "Up" button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pressing the "UP" button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The "UP" button can be pressed multiple times, each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pressing the "DOWN" button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The "DOWN" button can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps and DID messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
· Off-Road 2 (OR2) Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
· Off-Road 1 (OR1) Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
· Normal Ride Height (NRH) Indicator lamp 4 will be 5
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
· Entry/Exit Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed.
· Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode.
· Tire/Jack Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack Mode.
· Wheel Alignment Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit models that are also equipped with an Off Road Package, remove the lower fascia to prevent damage. The lower fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand. The front license plate bracket must be removed first if equipped.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
5
Front Air Dam 1 -- Front Bumper 2 -- Front Air Dam Fasteners
NOTE: On Summit models the lower front fascia is not removable.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower fascia from the upper fascia. Grasp the portion inside the wheel well. Pulling it downwards and toward you, separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.
NOTE: Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and upper fascia may result.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE: It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle and is not interchangeable with other radar sensors.
Radar sensor removal procedure (If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access to the sensor and bracket, disconnect the wiring harness from the sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip from the bracket.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam.
NOTE: It is recommended to scribe location to assist in reinstallation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear of the NOTE: Only models with the Off Road Package are
bumper beam.
equipped with the a protective connector.
5. Remove the plug from the protective connector and install on the sensor.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective connector.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE: All cruise control functions will be disabled when 5
the radar sensor is disconnected.
Radar sensor installation procedure (If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1 -- Inside Bumper Beam 2 -- Protective Connector Location 3 -- Sensor Bracket Fasteners 4 -- Sensor Bracket
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the protective connector on the bumper beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protective connector.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall the radar 2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs into the
sensor and bracket using the two fasteners.
slots on one side of the vehicle.
NOTE: Some alignment may be required upon fascia 3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to
installation to align sensor with fascia.
the opposite side of the vehicle.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the radar sensor.
NOTE: If you receive a fault, see your authorized dealer they may need to perform a sensor alignment.
Lower Front Fascia Installation (This will only work if you have a helper. We suggest):
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a sufficient number of tabs to support the weight of the lower fascia (typically one or two tabs) into the upper fascia.
NOTE: · It may be necessary to apply additional force to individual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged.
· Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may result.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
Quadra-LiftTM -- If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
When To Use 4WD LOW Range -- If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
The Selec-TerrainTM switch will automatically change the excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec- 4WD LOW range.
TerrainTM switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-TerrainTM
CAUTION!
5
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
to "Quadra-LiftTM If Equipped" in "Starting and Oper- driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
ating" for further information.
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering, as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Standing Water
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation" in "Starting and
Maintenance
Operating" for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle, will be lost. transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami-
5
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be-
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to pre- cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
vent component damage.
control.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent or Selec-Speed Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.
· Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
· Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
· Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on 5
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
· Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
· After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
· If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool.
If the "SERVICE POWER STEERING" message and a flashing icon are displayed on the DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the "POWER STEERING HOT" message and an icon are displayed on the DID screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE:
· Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
5.7L Engine
5
The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
· Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
· Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer's recommended power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all 5
surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake" Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
· When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake" Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
· This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to 5
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. · Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the "Brake" Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
normal capability, the remaining system will still func- System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
during application, greater pedal force required to slow systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
or stop, and potential activation of the "Brake System control in various driving conditions.
Warning Light."
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Trailer Sway 5
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., Control (TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Ready Alert
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS) and, if it has
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 two-speed transfer
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required case, Hill Descent Control (HDC), Selec Speed Control
with the power system operating.
(SSC).
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation; this is normal.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness.
· Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING! (Continued)
· The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
· The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
· The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is 5
functioning.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
· The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
· The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
· The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize 5
the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
· Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when the TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range.
High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this "On" mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to "Partial Off" mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the "ESC OFF" switch. When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC OFF" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
5
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off"
mode by pressing the "ESC OFF" switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the "Partial
Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen-
tarily pressing the "ESC OFF" switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
· Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode.
4WD Low Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the ESC system will be in the "Partial Off" mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to "Trailer Towing" in this section for further information. When TSC is functioning, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:
· Vehicle must be stopped.
· Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or greater hill.
· Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- 5
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
· If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
WARNING! (Continued)
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. · HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
HSA Off
Rain Brake Support -- If Equipped
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
"Uconnect® Access Settings" in "Understanding Your amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
Instrument Panel" for further information.
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
Ready Alert Braking -- If Equipped
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. no driver interaction is required. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
5
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped (Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only)
Hill Descent Control Switch
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
· Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
· Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h)
· Parking brake is released
· Driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the paddle shifter. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
· P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate.
· R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
5
· 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
· 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
· 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
· 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
· 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Deactivating HDC
· During HDC the +/- paddle shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection and will put the transmission into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission unless in Driver Override. During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
· HDC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:
· Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
· Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
· Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
· Vehicle is shifted to park.
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at any time. While in driver override the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will shift from 1st through the gear that is being displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Disabling HDC
Feedback to the driver:
HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur: · The driver presses the HDC switch. · The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. · The parking brake is applied.
The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDC switch which has an LED which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
· Driver door opens.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
5
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to excess speed.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped (Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only)
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Selec Speed Control Switch
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
· Parking brake is released
· Driver door is closed
· Driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:
· Driver releases throttle
5
· Driver releases brake
· Transmission is in any selection other than P
· Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
· Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
· Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h)
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the paddle shifter's. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
· P = No set speed. SSC may be enabled but will not activate.
· R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
· 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
NOTE:
· During SSC the +/- paddle shifter input is used for SSC target speed selection and will put the transmission into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission unless in Driver Override. During SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
· 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) · 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) · 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
· SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
· 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Driver Override:
Disabling SSC
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time. While in driver override the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will shift from 1st through whichever gear is displayed.
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur:
· The driver presses the SSC switch
· The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
Deactivating SSC
· The parking brake is applied.
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:
· Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application.
· Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
· Vehicle is shifted to park.
· Driver door opens.
5
· The vehicle is driven faster than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
longer than 70 seconds.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately)
Feedback to the driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has an LED which offers feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for SSC.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to excess speed.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/ RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
· Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously, except for when the vehicle is started while in 4L Range.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
5
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 -- Size Designation 3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load 5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
NOTE:
· P (Passenger) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
· European -- Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
· LT (Light Truck) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
· Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
5
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE: 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or D means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
5
· XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
· LL = Light load tire or
· C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
5
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Safety
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: · Safety and Vehicle Stability · Economy · Tread Wear · Ride Comfort
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
WARNING! (Continued)
Economy
· Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability response or over responsiveness in the steering.
5
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
· Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
· Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
· Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
· Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
5
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
· The tire has not been driven on when flat.
· The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
· The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
All Season Tires -- If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires -- If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
5
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped
Spare Tires -- If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than 5
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare -- If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare -- If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
WARNING!
5
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.
· Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
· Driving style.
· Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
· Distance driven.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicator." Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. · Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer. · Install on Rear Tires Only · Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro or equiva-
lent is recommended on P245/70/R17, P265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: · Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove 5
the damaged parts of the device before further use. · Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). · Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). · Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. · Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · Observe the traction device manufacturer's instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). · Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the "forward-cross" shown in the following diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire 5
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
CAUTION! (Continued) · After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
· The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care 5
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
(Continued)
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the following components:
· Receiver Module
· Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
· Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Driver Information Display (DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
· Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
DID will display a Tire Low message, an Inflate to
XXX message and a graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Under-
5
standing Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, BAR or kPa.
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic display to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the Inflate to XXX message.
Service Tpm System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic display, with "- -" in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The DID will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system 5
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault. In this case, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display, with pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the DID will still display a pressure value in the different color graphic display and an Inflate to XXX kPa message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine -- If Equipped RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: · This device may not cause harmful interference.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
· This device must accept any interference received,
economy and performance when using
including interference that may cause undesired op-
high-quality unleaded "regular" gasoline
eration.
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not 5
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
ing licenses:
5.7L Engine -- If Equipped
United States
MRXMERCTX1
Canada
2546A-MERCTX1
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline." Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol.
CAUTION!
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso- If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
· Operate in a lean mode. · OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
5
cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
· Poor engine performance. · Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing · Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:
· Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
· Change the engine oil and oil filter.
· Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: · The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. · An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
CAUTION! (Continued) · The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control 5
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
(Continued)
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: · Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the 5
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
E-85 Badge
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
· You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when refueling.
· You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.
NOTE:
· Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
· Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
Replacement Parts
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera- compatible components can damage your vehicle. 5
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Maintenance
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/Kilometers per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
· Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
· Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle.
· Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open.
· Pour fuel into funnel opening.
· Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
5
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
CAUTION!
Emergency Gas Can Refueling · Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.
· A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.
· Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to turn on.
· A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the closed position.
VEHICLE LOADING
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is 5
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Release Cable
bottom of the label is your VIN.
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should be manually returned to the closed position.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Payload
Tire Size
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rim Size
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to 5
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles Frontal Area
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tion Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Trailer Sway Control
5
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
WARNING!
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
· An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
· Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Class I - Light Duty
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
5
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine
3.6L 3.6L 5.7L 5.7L
Model
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
4x2
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
4x4
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
4x2
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
4x4
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note) 620 lbs (281 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg) 740 lbs (336 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit Models) -- If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
5
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 -- Hitch Receiver Cover 2 -- Locking Retainers
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you), pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver cover.
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
Hitch Receiver Cover To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: · The tongue weight of the trailer
· The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle
· The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional 5
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to "Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
· Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
· Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the "Maintenance Schedule." Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: · Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. · When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. · Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels. · GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
WARNING! (Continued) · Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti- 5
lized.
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements -- Tires
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
· Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
· Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
· Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
· Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.
WARNING!
· Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.
· Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
· When replacing tires, refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
· Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
· An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
· Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
5
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
1 -- Female Pins 2 -- Male Pin 3 -- Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 -- Park 5 -- Left Stop/Turn 6 -- Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes
5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Towing Tips
Paddle Shift Mode
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping · When using the Paddle Shift switches, select the
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
traffic.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "5" if
Automatic Transmission
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "4" or "3" if needed to maintain the desired speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
· To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to 5
Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower gear.
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- Electronic Speed Control -- If Equipped
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- · Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.
· When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle. This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured.
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Towing Condition Flat Tow
Dolly Tow On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground NONE
Front Rear ALL
Two-Wheel Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED OK OK
Four-Wheel Drive Models Without
4LO Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4LO
Range
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
· Transmission in
PARK · Transfer case in
5
NEUTRAL (N)
· Tow in forward
direction
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Recreational Towing Two-Wheel Drive Models
· When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
· Vehicles equipped with Quadra-LiftTM must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to "QuadraLiftTM If Equipped" in "Starting and Operating" for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
Recreational Towing Quadra-Trac I® (Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
5
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing -- QuadraTrac II® /QuadraDrive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
· DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
· The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
· Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)" to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-LiftTM air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A "FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL" message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
9. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine off will automatically place the transmission in PARK.
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (without pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
· Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before press-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
5
· The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
· A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
· If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-LiftTM air suspension, the engine should be started and left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle's ride height to compensate for temperature effects.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
· Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before press-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
5
· The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake · A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally. indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .569 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .572 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 6
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS -- IF EQUIPPED . .589 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .593 Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning · On the highways -- slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- · In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
· If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
6
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
· You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/ Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
· Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
· The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For vehicles not equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler funnel is stored in the left storage bin under the load floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to "Adding Fuel" in "Starting And Operating" in this manual.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear 6
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Jack Storage Location
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking points. Failure to follow this information could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody components.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever into PARK. 5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. 7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to
"Quadra-Lift® -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on disabling automatic leveling.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: · Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. · Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
· Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to 6
be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK. · Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack. · Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift. · Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change. · If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic. · To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
Jack And Tool Assembly
6
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Front Jacking Location
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
6
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
6
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
Stowed Spare
tray.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the road wheel in the cargo area.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger's front seat. There are remote locations located under the hood to assist in jump-starting.
WARNING!
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
· Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
· Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
Remote Battery Posts
1 -- Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap) 2 -- Remote Negative (-) Post
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle 6
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
(Continued)
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
6
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ESC Off switch (if necessary), to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
· Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS -- IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
· Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. 6
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. · Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away from the console hinges.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
6
Manual Park Release Cover
Release Latch
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal 4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simulta-
latch in towards the tether strap.
neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension upward while pushing the release latch towards the tether to unlock the lever.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is activated may damage the Manual Park Release mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks into position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under "Recreational Towing" in the "Starting and Operating" section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-LiftTM must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section
on Quadra-LiftTM for more information. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine 6
will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not
to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
Stowed Position
tie-down tension.
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Flatbed
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front Rear ALL
2WD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is operable: · Transmission in NEUTRAL · 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed · 30 miles (48 km) max distance
OK BEST METHOD
See instructions in "Recreational Towing" under "Starting and Operating" · Transmission in PARK · Transfer Case in NEUTRAL · Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
CAUTION!
· Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
· When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
· If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
Without The Key Fob
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
· The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
Manual Park Release in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
6
· The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only approved method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
· The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
· Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .601 ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .602 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .603 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .606
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .614 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 7
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .664
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .665 Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .667 Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Halogen Headlamps -- If Equipped . . . . . . . .662
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
1 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 -- Air Cleaner Filter
7
2 -- Engine Oil Dipstick
7 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 -- Engine Oil Fill
8 -- Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir
9 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L
1 -- Power Distribution Center 2 -- Engine Oil Fill 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 -- Air Cleaner Filter
5 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 7 -- Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 8 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)." It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
CAUTION! · Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. · If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
· The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
· The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for 7
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
· Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve 7
months, whichever occurs first.
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity -- 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the "Engine Compartment" illustration in this section.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity -- 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to "Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further informa-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
7
tion.
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
WARNING!
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
mended.
Gasoline Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter.
7
serious personal injury.
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 -- Clean Air Hose Clamp 2 -- Air Hose 3 -- Spring Clips
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 -- Air Cleaner Cover 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly.
7
Air Cleaner Filter
1 -- Air Cleaner Filter 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
· When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch position. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Conditions that would require replacement: · Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body) · Rib or belt wear · Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) · Belt slips
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
· "Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
WARNING!
· Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
· Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
7
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.
amounts of water. Refer to "Jump-Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
(Continued)
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. · Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
CAUTION! (Continued)
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. · If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
WARNING!
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.
· The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a -- If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other
7
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf -- If Equipped
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
· Do not remove the A/C air filter while the ignition is in the ON/RUN position or personal injury may result.
· Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
Glove Compartment
1 -- Glove Compartment Travel Stops 2 -- Glove Compartment Tension Tether 3 -- Glove Compartment Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove compartment door and push inward to release the glove compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by 7
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right side to fully remove the cover.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 -- Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 -- Glove Compartment Door
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 -- Retaining Tab 2 -- Mid Way Snap 3 -- Filter Cover Hinge
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage
the housing.
the glove compartment travel stops.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
CAUTION!
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
to properly install the filter will result in the need to operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door.
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
· Wear Or Uneven Edges
· Foreign Material
· Hardening Or Cracking
· Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
7
1 -- Wiper 2 -- Release Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Release Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and 7
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Wiper Blade
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 -- Wiper Arm 4 -- Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
Adding Washer Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the "WASHER FLUID LOW" message will be displayed.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear Exhaust System
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; 7
will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solu- have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
range of your climate. This rating information can be found aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
on most washer fluid containers.
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
· Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
· The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
· Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: · Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
· Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
· Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System -- Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compat-
ible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
7
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
· We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032.
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F (-37° C) are anticipated.
· Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
· Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. 7
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
· Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
· Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
· Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a 7
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check -- Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a "MAX" dot and a "MIN" dot. The fluid level must be kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted.
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
WARNING!
· Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
WARNING! (Continued) · To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. · Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also 7
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
CAUTION!
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Drain
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintain- mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
ing Your Vehicle" for further information.
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Transfer Case
CAUTION!
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could damage them and cause them to leak.
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should Selection Of Lubricant
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
7
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration
CAUTION! (Continued)
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis- life of the vehicle.
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
7
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the disassembled for any reason.
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: · Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. · Stone and gravel impact. · Insects, tree sap and tar. · Salt in the air near seacoast localities. · Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing · Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
· Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
· Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
· Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Special Care
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, 7
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
· If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
· Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
· All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
· To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure -- If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
· Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
· Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
· For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
· For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
· Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid 7
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
· When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
· Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
· If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Power Distribution Center
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F03 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F17 F19 F20 F22
Cartridge Fuse 60 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue
Micro Fuse
Description Radiator Fan Compressor for Air Suspension - If Equipped Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump Starter Solenoid Emission Sensors (Diesel engine only) Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only) Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped Body Controller #3 / Power Locks Blower Motor Front Body Controller #4 / Interior Lights #2 Headlamp Washer- If Equipped Headrest Solenoid- If Equipped Passenger Door Module Engine Control Module
Cavity F23 F24 F25 F26 F28 F29 F30 F32 F34 F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Clear 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Description
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
7
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor - If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F42 F44 F46 F49 F50 F51
Cartridge Fuse
F52
F53
F55
F56
F57
F59
F60
Micro Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue
5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue
Description Horn
Diagnostic Port Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control Air Suspension Control Module - If Equipped Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition / Steering
Column Lock Battery Sensor Trailer Tow Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped DTV / DSRC Additional Content (Diesel engine only) HID Headlamps LH - If Equipped Purging Pump (Diesel engine only) Transmission Control Module
Cavity F61
F62 F63 F64 F66 F67
F68 F69 F70 F71 F73 F74 F76
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Green 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Description
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module - If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
7
Audio Amplifier
HID Headlamp RH - If Equipped
Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F77
Cartridge Fuse
F78
F80
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
F88
Micro Fuse 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect
Module Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering - If
Equipped Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise Control
Fuel Door Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module Airbag Module Air Suspension If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steering Column Control Module Instrument Panel Cluster
Cavity F90/F91
F92 F93 F94 F95 F96
F97
F98 F99 F100 F101
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
Description Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / ParkSense® Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger - If
Equipped Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel - If
Equipped Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems Module 7
Active Damping - If Equipped Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams - If
Equipped
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F103 F104
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow
CAUTION!
· When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Description
Cabin Heater (Diesel Ongine Only)/Rear HVAC Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may: · Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Glove Box Lamp Grab Handle Lamp Overhead Console Reading Lamps Rear Cargo Lamp Visor Vanity Lamp Underpanel Courtesy Lamps Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) Telltale/Hazard Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
2142
V26377
906
103
74
7
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam) - If Equipped Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) Headlamps (High Beam) - If Equipped Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker - If Equipped Premium Front Side Marker - If Equipped Front Park/Turn Lamp - If Equipped Rear Body Side Turn Signal Lamps Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps Liftgate Backup Lamps Rear License Lamps Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
Bulb Number H11
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) 9005
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer) LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
H11 W5W LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer) 7444NA (WY27/8W) 7440NA (WY21W) LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer) 921 (W16W) LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer) 3157KRD LCP
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer) LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) -- If
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- Equipped
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
7
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Halogen Headlamps -- If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb onequarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb onequarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
· Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
· Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
7
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector.
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps 1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate. 3. Continue removing the trim. 4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
1 -- Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket 2 -- LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove
7
3 -- Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the lamp assembly.
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
1 -- Auxiliary LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 2 -- Backup Bulb Socket
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Rear License Lamp
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at 1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Authorized Dealer.
Dealer
7
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.4 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric 94 Liters 5.6 Liters 6.6 Liters 9.9 Liters 14.6 Liters 15.2 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs 3.6L Engine Spark Plugs 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
7
SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fuel Selection 3.6L Engine Fuel Selection 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part 87 Octane 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATFTM Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I®)
We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II®)
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
7
Axle Differential (Rear) With Electronic Limited-Slip We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Differential (ELSD)
Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
Axle Differential (Rear) Without Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir 3.6L Engine Power Steering Reservoir 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
I
N
T
E
CONTENTS
N A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
N C
E
S C H E D U L E S
8
M 674 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N T
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N A N
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
C E
Based
on
engine
operation
conditions,
the
oil
change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S C H
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
E cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
D U L
influence when the "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
E change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
S (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
8 soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
· Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
· Check engine oil level
· Check windshield washer fluid level
· Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
· Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and power steering, and fill as needed.
· Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 675 M
A
Required Maintenance
I
N
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
T
pages for required maintenance.
E
N
A
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
N
· Change oil and filter.
C E
· Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
S C
· Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
H
· Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
E D
· Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. · Inspect exhaust system.
U L E
· Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
S
8
240,000 150,000
224,000 140,000
208,000 130,000
192,000 120,000
176,000 110,000
144,000 90,000 160,000 100,000
128,000 80,000
M 676 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A I
Maintenance Chart
N
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000
T E
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
A
N C
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000
S
C
H Additional Inspections
E D
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
U Inspect front suspension, tie rod L ends, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8E
S
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your ve-
hicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
240,000 150,000
224,000 140,000
208,000 130,000
192,000 120,000
176,000 110,000
144,000 90,000 160,000 100,000
128,000 80,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 677 M
A
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000
Mileage or time passed
I
(whichever comes first)
N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000
Or Kilometers:
A N
C
E
Inspect transfer case fluid.
X
X
X
XS
Additional Maintenance
C
Replace engine air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
H E
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).**
U
X
L
E
X
S
8
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
X
X
whichever comes first.
240,000 150,000
224,000 140,000
208,000 130,000
192,000 120,000
176,000 110,000
144,000 90,000 160,000 100,000
128,000 80,000
M 678 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000
A N
Or Kilometers:
C
E
S Change transfer case fluid. C Inspect and replace PCV valve if H necessary. E D ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, U yearly intervals do not apply. L E S
8
X X
WARNING!
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
· Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 679 M A I N T E N A N C E
S C H E D U L E S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .683 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .684 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .684 In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
9
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .688
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
9
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
684 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. · If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
· If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: · Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
· Authorized dealer name · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (877) 4265337 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 685
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9
4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French).
686 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 687
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in roadsafety/ a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
9
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
688 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 689
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
· 18008904038 (U.S.) · 18003871143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: · www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
requirements in addition to these grades.
690 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
692 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .191 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .611 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Alarm Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .382 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .263
INDEX 693
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 10
694 INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .604 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .99 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .98 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .90 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .86
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .635 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
INDEX 695
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 10
696 INDEX
Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Child-Protection Door Lock -- Rear Doors . . . . . .34 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 DVD Player (Video Entertainment SystemTM) . . . . . .358
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .263 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .186 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .297 Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .604 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
INDEX 697
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 10
698 INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .669 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
INDEX 699
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
10
700 INDEX
Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 iPod® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Key Fob Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19 Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Keyless Enter-N-GoTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
INDEX 701
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .291 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 10
702 INDEX
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .291 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .291 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
INDEX 703
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 10
704 INDEX
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .500 Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .263 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .635 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .561 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .444 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .378
INDEX 705
Remote Starting Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .329 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 10
706 INDEX
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .58 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .61 Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .63 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .62 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .58 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
INDEX 707
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .378 10
708 INDEX
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .68 Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .390 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .499
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .557 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
INDEX 709
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .246 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 10
710 INDEX
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .329 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
INDEX 711
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
15WK741-126-AB
Second Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
Adobe PDF Library 11.0